Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 .

2 .

Add more detailed modelling elements. and piping. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Germany. and plumbing fixtures. electrical. fixtures. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. electrical panels. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. 3 . You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. such as duct. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Add basic MEP elements. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. such as mechanical equipment.

but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. You do not design entire systems. Create schedules. when you add ductwork. templates. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Contact your CAD manager for more information. In this exercise. When you open a training file. such as templates and families. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. On the Contents tab. and tags. When you install the training files as instructed. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. you learn where the training files are located. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. annotations. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. your Training folder may be in a different location. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. After completing each exercise. to provide a richer and more finished design. NOTE Depending on your installation. Metric: files for users working with metric units. however.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. For example. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. However. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. as well as how to open and save them. and sheets to document the project. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. So. you can choose to save your work. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. For example. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. views. is located and accessed in the training files location. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Create detail views. Metric file names have an _m suffix.

Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. you are prompted to save the changes. For Files of type.rvt. Accessing Training Files | 5 . You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. enter the new file name. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. You may close the file with or without saving changes. and click Save. 8 If you have made changes. and click the Training Files icon. if you open settings. 3 In the right pane. click ➤ Save As. double-click Imperial or Metric.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.rvt) is selected. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. a list of file types displays. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. verify that Project Files (*. 4 Click the training file name. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and you can open any supported file type. the Open dialog displays.rvt and make changes. For example. For File name. scroll down. select the folder in which to save the new file. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes.

6 .

the parameter is one of association or connection. drawings. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the hierarchy of elements. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. If the length of the elevation is changed. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. You learn the terminology. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. drawing sheets. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the operation of the software is parametric. hence. the door retains this relationship to the partition. 2D and 3D view. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. and schedules required for a building project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. If you move the partition. every drawing sheet. In this case. schedules. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. and phases when you need it. In this case. In the Revit MEP model. sections. and plans. ■ ■ 7 . You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. the floor or roof remains connected. scope. quantities.

Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. boilers. walls and ceilings are hosts. dimensions. sinks. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. grids. and electrical panels. sprinklers. and keynotes are annotation elements. boilers. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and 2D detail components. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. levels. ducts. For example. When you change something. They help to describe or document the design. For example. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. Examples include detail lines. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. They display in relevant views of the design. filled regions. sprinklers.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. tags. For example. For example. ducts. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and electrical panels. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Datum elements help to define project context. tags. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. dimensions. For example. sinks.

some terms are unique to Revit MEP. In Revit MEP. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. elevation views.This implementation provides flexibility for designers.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. families. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. floors. such as roofs. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. or bottom of foundation. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. from geometry to construction data. first floor. Most often. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Project: In Revit MEP. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. views of the project. For example. and types. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . The project file contains all information for the building design. This information includes components used to design the model. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. schedules. Often. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. section views. If you can draw. programming is not required. and drawings of the design. However. for example. you can explicitly control them. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. In other cases. you must be in a section or elevation view. By using a single project file. top of wall. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. and so forth). North . To place levels. and ceilings. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software.

You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. A type can also be a style. System families can be transferred between projects. or layer the views to see only the one on top.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Then experiment with them. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. and similar graphical representation. identical use. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. pipes. each in-place family contains only a single type. However. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. A type can be a specific size of a family. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. such as a 30” X 42” title block. System families include ducts. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Unlike system and standard component families. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. hiding. and wires. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. You can also display several project views at one time. For example. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. showing. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. With a few clicks. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. Type: Each family can have several types. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). For example.

Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. To return the panel to the ribbon. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides.

The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. When working on the Modify tab. and for switching views. tools used for running analysis on the current design. select the tool first. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. then select what you want to modify. project and system parameters. data and systems. and CAD files. and settings.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for editing existing elements. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. architect-specific tools.. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 .Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. By default. provides requested information. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. provides access to common tools. For example. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. when adding duct. To keep a panel expanded. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. closes the application menu (double-click). Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. displays frequently used tools. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel.

select a template and create a new drawing. such as Export and Publish. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. click.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Open) save the current drawing. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Export) On the application menu.. select a file to open... (Save As) export the current drawing..

annotation.. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. provides views including Default 3D. family. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. annotation. family. but is not enabled by default. and Walkthrough. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Licensing) close the file. publish the current project. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. click. or template file. to. or template file. Camera.On the application menu... To enable or disable a tool item. saves a current project.. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . (Publish) print the current drawing. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. (Print) access product and license information.

Starting with the most recent command. To show the Status Bar again. When you are highlighting an element or component. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. This displays the command history in a list. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Clipboard. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. However. or the Family Editor. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). when you switch to another editing mode. Group. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. repeat the command. When you are using a command. check the Status Bar. Modify. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. To hide the Status Bar. displaying the same information. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode.To undo or redo a series of operations. In addition. workshared components. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame.

Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Place a Wall. click (Modify). including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . To change existing elements to a different type. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. On the Quick Access toolbar. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar.To cancel or exit the current command. for example. When you place an element in a drawing. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. select one or more elements of the same category.

In the following steps. Zoom the view In the tutorials. For example. 1 Click ➤ Open. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.rvt. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. After you are familiar with these tasks. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.

on the Navigation bar. the view zooms in on the selected area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. In the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 6 Click in the drawing area. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. click . 9 To display SteeringWheels. When you release the mouse button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. Modifying the View | 19 . To modify or add snap increments. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x).

The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 14 To exit the wheel. To define settings for SteeringWheels. press ESC. Click and drag to orbit the design. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. ➤ Options. moving the wheel to the desired location. and click tin the Options dialog. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. click the SteeringWheels tab. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and then using the Zoom tool again. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 11 Click and hold the mouse button. As you move the mouse. For more information about SteeringWheels. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator.

Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. referred to as shape handles. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and open Level 2 . 2 Enter ZR. as shown. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . and select the duct. Similar controls.Design. After you are familiar with these tasks. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. These are the drag controls. display along the ends.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views.HVAC Plan . Small blue dots. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. called drag controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. bottoms.

click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Move. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. All changes you make to a project are tracked. on the Standard toolbar.3 Click and drag the bottom control. select the first item in the list. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. click the Undo command. In this example. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 6 On the Undo menu. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. or press CTRL+Z. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.

After selecting the element to move. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . require 2 clicks to complete the command. as shown. 10 Move the cursor to the right.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 11 With the duct already selected. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Some commands. you want to move the duct. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. The duct is moved to the new position. for example. and click again to specify the ending position. such as Move and Copy. and drag it to the left as shown. In this case. click to specify the starting position.

Press ESC twice. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 13 To end a command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. For example.End a command Some commands. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Supply. 14 Enter VG. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Select Mechanical . such as the Modify Ducts command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Click OK. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.Return.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

such as ducts and pipes. use copy/monitor. such as coordination review and interference checking. such as the default project units and settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. under Template file. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default.rte template. You can choose from several templates. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. and modify system settings. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 5 In the New Project dialog. under Create new. select Project. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. and geometry from the starting template. settings. Finally. create and manage views. 6 Click OK. 27 . 2 In the New Project dialog. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. click Training files. and click Open. In that case. You can either select a template from the template library. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. and loadable families. the default building levels and standard views. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. you learn how to start a project from a template. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. click Browse. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. link files. New projects inherit all the families. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. system families.

Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. for City. click Edit. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. (Browse). and open North. ■ For Building Construction. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 8 In the drawing area. navigate to Imperial Templates. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Click OK. review the construction materials listed. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. click (Browse). 10 Using the same method. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. select Manchester. Click Cancel. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. select Level 1. create another new project using the Construction template. ■ ■ Under Create new. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select School or University. In the Choose Template dialog. If you want to use a template other than the default. for Energy Data. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you can select it now. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog.7 In the Project Browser. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. For example. NH. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Click OK twice. For Location. click Browse. under Energy Analysis. When you select the material. select Project template.rte template and click Open. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog.

Holding CTRL. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. wiring. select Views. under Pipe Settings. Creating an MEP Project | 29 .19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. click Rectangular. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for 3/4". Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 22 In the right pane. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder.rfa and click Open. 23 In the left pane. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Click OK twice. click Round. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 11 1/2". and demand factors for electrical systems. 24 In the right pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. plumbing. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. For Categories. under Duct Settings. click Sizes. 10 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and fire protection systems. power distribution systems. piping. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. click Wiring. for 3 1/2". 26 In the right pane. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 4 1/2". for 3 1/2". For Ground Wire Tick Mark. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 25 In the left pane. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 5 1/2". After standard settings have been established for an organization. and 5 1/2". 27 Click OK. under Duct Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 4 1/2". and 12 1/2". 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Identity Data. 33 Click OK.

select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. select View Name. and groups that are contained in a project. For Sort by. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Select Ascending Click OK twice.Origin to Origin. select Family and Type. under Template file. Linking Projects In this exercise. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. select Project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. families. In addition.rvt. 4 In the New Project dialog.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. click Browse. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. For Then by. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. select Associated Level. To enable this coordination. Notice that the file is saved as a template. sheets. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. You need to create the MEP model for the project. select Auto . select Sub-Discipline. From the Positioning list. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. under Create new. click Training. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. 38 Close the file. Click Open. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 5 Click OK.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and Import dialogs. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Under Library Name. and click Open. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list.11 In the Places dialog. or families. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. Load. ➤ Open. Save. click (Add Value). 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . templates. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and change the name to My Library. and click OK twice. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and click (Browse). and select it as the library path. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click My Library. click the My Library icon.

This path is determined during installation. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 11 In the Options dialog. If you want to relocate this path. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library. such as bump maps. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 27 Click OK. click OK. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 9 In the text editor. If you work in a large office. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 8 Under Building industry dictionary. view the current path. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 3 Under Settings. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. and decal image files. 19 Click Cancel. click Edit.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 21 On the File Locations tab. 20 Click ➤ Options. click Places. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 22 Select My Library. 5 In the text editor. click the Spelling tab. specify the new location here. custom color files. select Ignore words in uppercase. 2 In the Options dialog. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 14 Click in the drawing area.

click Restore Defaults.17 In the Spelling dialog. under Template file. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.. click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 23 In the text editor. you modify snap settings. As you zoom in and out within a view. delete sheetmtl-CU. and enter 1 . In this exercise. click Training Files. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 21 Under Personal dictionary. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise.rte. 2 In the New Project dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 6 In the Snaps dialog. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 19 In the Options dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click OK. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click Browse. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. under Dimension Snaps. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. you modify snap increments. 22 In the text editor. 20 Under Settings. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click Close. click the Spelling tab. 24 In the Options dialog. 18 Click ➤ Options. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. 25 Close the file without saving it. work with snapping turned off. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. You can turn snap settings on and off. click Edit.

and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. click OK. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu.7 Under Object Snaps. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. enter SM. zoom out until it does so. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. snapping reverts to the system default settings. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . If it does not. If you do not have a wheel button. TIP To zoom while sketching. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. This is the increment that you added previously. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. use the wheel button on your mouse. deselect Chain. and move the cursor to the right. 8 In the Snaps dialog. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. While sketching. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. For example. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments.

and move the cursor to the right. the midpoint. and delete the value 1’ . 26 Close the file. 22 Move the cursor downward.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. it will snap to the endpoints. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 19 Enter SM. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. and specify the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and the wall edges. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. Do not set the wall end point. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Notice that snapping is once again active. 25 Click OK. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. If you move the cursor along the wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .. with or without saving it.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building.autodesk. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. As you create the mechanical system. After applying a color scheme to the zones. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. methodology. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you will understand the process.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. go to http://www. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. water source heat pump (WSHP). and then you create a plenum level. In this exercise. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. By following the recommended workflow. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you first plan the system. This system consists of a cooling tower. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. In this lesson. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. However. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you design a mechanical system for an office building. If the tutorial training files are not present. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. 45 . At the end of the tutorial. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you first configure the linked architectural model. After finishing each exercise. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you can choose to save your work.

3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. not in the MEP training file. In this section. under Constraints. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and after the linked model highlights. you add a level for plenums. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. roof. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click to select it. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i.Space Plan is highlighted. Next. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. These components are defined in the architectural training file.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. NOTE When working with a linked file. select Room Bounding. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. click Training Files. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. ceilings.

click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level).6 In the Project Browser. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 9 On the Draw panel. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and double-click West . and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. For Offset. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and in the Plan View Types dialog.MEP. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Press Esc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP .Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. Click Plan View Types. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and click OK. The new level is placed. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. enter 8'. and enter Level 2 Plenum.

In this exercise. for View Scale. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. ■ Click OK twice. For Cut plane. However.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. and for Offset. For Sub-Discipline. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces.Plenum.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. In this exercise. NOTE After finishing each exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. right-click Level 2 Plenum. for Level. you place spaces in areas of the building model. enter an Offset of 1' 0". This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. and then place spaces in various types of areas. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. For View Classification. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. select Level Above (Level 3). for Top. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you can choose to save your work. Under Extents. for View Range. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. right-click Level 2 Plenum. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. and click Properties. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and click Apply Default View Template. In the next exercise. for Default View Template. Under View Depth. Under Identity Data. enter 0. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. select MEP . 21 Close the file with or without saving it. select Design. select Plenum Plan. click Edit. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP .

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select New. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and ceilings). For Upper Limit. select Level 2 Plenum. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.Space Plan is highlighted. select Horizontal. For (Tag Location). 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. click Training Files. Placing Spaces | 49 . 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. walls. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. enter 0. For Space.

7 Click to place the space. 9 Select the space. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Number.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 14 In the drawing area. enter 219. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Click OK. ensuring coordination between the files. enter Library. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Name. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .

21 Using the method learned previously. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. For Offset. Placing Spaces | 51 . Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. and then click Modify. For Upper Limit.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. select Level 3.

Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. under Energy Analysis. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then split the space using a space separation line. 23 Click OK.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. you place a space in a large corridor area.

6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. select Level 3. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 5 On the Options Bar.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 0. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. indicating that it’s the active view. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. for Upper Limit. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. and then press Esc. and for Offset.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

and scroll to the newly placed space. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. as shown. double-click the space name. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 11 Close the schedule view. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 9 In the floor plan. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. In the schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .7 In the Project Browser. and press Enter. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. the plan view would have updated with the changes. 10 Using the same method. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. enter Corridor. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. which was numbered 219Q. change the space number to 216A.

with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 16 Using the method learned previously. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).15 Press Esc twice. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . place a space in the lower area of the split space. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 18 Close the file with or without saving it.

Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . If necessary.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files.rvt. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you place a space in a chase. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.

for Upper Limit. Under Identity Data. click in the chase area to place the space. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select the space. 10 In the plan view. expand Spaces. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. enter 225PC. enter 0. For Offset. select Roof Level.4 Press Esc. On the Options Bar. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 12 Click in the section view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. In the plan view. For Number. right-click. enter 4'. select Level 3. select Interior and Reference. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. enter Chase. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 6 Enter VG. for Name. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . 8 Enter WT to tile the views. for Upper Limit. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. For Limit Offset. and then click OK. and click Element Properties.

You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 15 Press Esc. and maximize the view. In the next exercises. and click OK. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. 17 Type ZF. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view.Bounding elements (such as walls. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. select Space Tag With Volume. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. All spaces in the view are tagged. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element.Space Plan. floors. under Loaded Tags. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . ceilings. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. it is automatically added to the Default zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . under Spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. click Reference. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. 1 In the Project Browser. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. After a space is placed in an area. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. which removes the space from the Default zone.rvt. In this exercise. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). To display space reference lines.Zoning is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. click View ➤ Zones. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.

The Zone tool is active.Zoning is highlighted. under Energy Analysis. Using the Edit Zone tab. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and modify the zone properties. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. the Edit Zone tab displays. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Next. indicating that it’s the active view. As you do this. and click OK. Instruction 221. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. click Training Files. double-click 121 Cafeteria.5 In the System Browser. and verify the zones in the System Browser. indicating that the space is occupiable. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. under Spaces. click Reference. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Finish Editing Zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. To display space reference lines. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 In the drawing area. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. and a new zone is created. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Occupiable. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. select Computer Lab 222. you assign spaces to zones in the building. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. you can add or remove a space from the zone.rvt. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and Electrical 220 spaces. you assign spaces to a zone. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.

5 With the drawing area active. type VG. you need to activate the zone visibility. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). select HVAC Zones. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. To view the zone in the drawing area. Click OK. Instruction. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . Expand HVAC Zones.In the System Browser. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab.

expand 2 . click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.West . and verify the zone in the System Browser.West . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. In this exercise. 11 Close the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Zoning. under Identity Data. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views. click Finish Editing Zone.Area B. indicating that it’s the active view. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.rvt. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 In the System Browser. click Reference. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. and click OK.Zoning is highlighted. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. under Spaces. To display space reference lines. for Name. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.TIP After you finish editing the zone. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. enter 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.

Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning view.Zoning view. zoom out. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 8 In the Level 1 .5 Click in the Level 1 . Select Attached End. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .Zoning floor plan.Zoning view to activate it. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. click in the Level 2 . 15 Press Esc. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". 9 With the Add Space tool active. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.

East. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. enter Lounge . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 . click the corner where the Top. click Training Files. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. you verify the building. for Name Value. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.Zoning view. and zone information. and click OK. on the ViewCube. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed.rvt. double-click the zone tag. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. space. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning to make it the active view. Front. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.

■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . you isolate the space. Next. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. verify that Wireframe is selected. and select 109 Lounge. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. With 109 Lounge selected. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. click (Isolate). You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Using the Highlight tool. Click (Highlight). ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands.

you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone.■ On the Details tab. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). select 109 Lounge. and then click OK. Below the list of spaces and zones. click . For People. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. the space information displays for the selected space. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. scroll down in the left pane. ■ ■ ■ Next. select Lounge/Recreation. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. verify that <Building> is selected. Next. select 1_South_Lounge. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. and in the People dialog. and click OK. click . and then click OK. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. click . Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. For Construction Type. For Electrical Loads. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool.

floors. outdoor air per area.00 °F : 54. and air changes per hour. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. the zone information displays for the selected zone. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 .Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. heating air temperature. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. Below the list of spaces and zones.00 °F : N/A is specified. cooling air temperature. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. Next. and humidification set point. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. roofs. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that <Building> is selected. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. click (Shading). For Cooling Information. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. verify that 70.00 °F : 90. verify that 74. This indicates the outdoor air per person. For Heating Information. and other room-bounding components. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. and dehumidification set point. 12 Using the methods learned previously. This indicates the heating set point.00 °F : N/A is specified. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified.

and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Number. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click Cancel.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. Under Energy Analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Click OK. Under Energy Analysis. select Level 3. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. select Plenum. open MEP . ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter 212P. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. enter 0. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Offset. 15 In the Project Browser. select Plenum. For Name.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.

enter 03101. click Edit. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. On the Place tab. verify that Manchester. for Energy Data. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and verify that the space has replaced the void. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. is selected. double-click Level 2 . click in the Value field. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. space. under Energy Analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. select School or University. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ .Space Plan. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Training Files. and select space Plenum 212P. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. for City. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and zone information. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. For Location. For Postal Code.rvt. NH. In this exercise. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. you verified building. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog.

verify that Level 1 is selected. for Values. For Project Phase. enter 200 Btu/h. and click OK. For Space Type. For Ground Plane. For Condition Type. click Edit. 8 In the drawing area. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. For Sensible. For Sliver Space Tolerance. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. and click Element Properties. you need to select this option. verify that 1' 0" is specified.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. For Building Construction. for Values. For Latent. this option adjusts the times automatically. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. In order to select a space. verify that New Construction is selected. and enter 50 sq. for Building Service. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. and then click . For Export Complexity. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. ft. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. select Library . For People. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . a cooling load. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. right-click. enter 150 Btu/h. select Heated and cooled. select Specified. Select Area per person. and click OK. click in the Value column. select Specified. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. verify that <Building> is specified.Audio Visual. under Volume Computations. or neither. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. Under Heat Gain (per Person). NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. ■ On the Weather tab. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. both. verify that Occupiable is selected. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. select space Library 219. Click OK twice. and click OK. If.

Select the space associated with the warning. Next. For Electrical Loads. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select Actual. click Edit. You should correct the space error in the building model. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . Revit MEP stores this information as project information. 12 Click the Details tab. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). verify that Manchester. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. for Values. NH. For Building Construction.■ ■ ■ Click OK. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for Values. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and click to learn the cause for the warning. For Location. select 219 Library. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . select Actual. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. For Building Service. Click OK twice. verify that School or University is selected. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. There should be no warnings displayed. is specified. and under Heating Information. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. and can be modified here. verify that <Building> is specified. click Calculate. You have verified the building information. and click OK. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. Under Power. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. click Information).

A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. space. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. For Color Scheme. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 21 Click OK. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. select HVAC Zones. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. under Energy Analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . space. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. or zone information.rvt. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. click to the right of the building to place the legend. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . weather. select 219 Library. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 Review the loads report for project. 3 In the drawing area. and a loads report displays. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. or make any changes to the model. 16 After you review the loads report. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. and zone information for the building model. 17 In the loads report. 19 In the drawing area. Click OK.

select the color scheme legend. The new scheme displays in the view. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . under Schemes. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range.5 Zoom in to the legend. select Tonnage Range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. in 1-ton increments.

11 Using the method learned previously.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Select available fields from. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Name. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. more category options are available. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In the next exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog.Space Fill is the active view. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document.12 Close the file with or without saving it. For Phase. Select Schedule building components. select Spaces. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. select New Construction. Click OK. select Spaces.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter Space Airflow Schedule. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. In this exercise. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.

enter .(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select Air Flow. In the Calculated Value dialog. For Discipline.■ Under Available fields. select Number. Select Formula. Select Ascending. select Not Between. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. For Fields. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. and then click . and then select Hidden field. In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Then by. enter Airflow Delta. For Formula. select Level. for Formula. select Calculated Supply Airflow. ■ Click Calculated Value. select Airflow Delta. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Level. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select HVAC. and Blank line. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. In the Fields dialog. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then click Conditional Format. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK. click (Browse). and click OK. For Type. Header.

7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next lesson. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. For Background Color. Click OK twice. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. select red. In later exercises. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. In the Color dialog. In this exercise. and click OK. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM.■ ■ ■ For Value. right-click to access schedule properties. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Under Conditions to Use. verify that Show is highlighted. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. ■ The schedule displays. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. click the color swatch. a view opens that contains the selected space. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM.

78 .

you size ductwork and validate your air system design. As you place the air terminals. you modify air terminal parameters. and work with the airflow schedule. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). Then. In this lesson. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. 79 . After completing the air systems lesson. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After system creation. you will create supply air systems.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. click Training Files. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. indicating that it’s the active view. and scroll to space 223.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. the space crossing lines display. 3 In the ceiling view.

17 Move the cursor down. type 12. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 13 On the Options Bar. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. If the host element is modified or moved.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 9 On the Placement panel. 15 On the Options Bar.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. verify that Constrain is cleared. and select Supply Diffuser .HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . for Flow. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Also. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and then press Esc to end the command. the hosted elements are updated as well. and then select both Copy and Multiple. as shown. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. which in this case is the ceiling grid. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. enter 425 CFM.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . select the diffuser. and press Enter. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Place on Face. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. and press Enter. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.

If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. select one of the diffusers. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. as shown. 27 Select Return Diffuser . Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. clear Leader.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Place 2 diffusers. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. and then press Esc. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 In the drawing area. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. click Yes.rfa. click Place on Face. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 28 On the Placement tab. Next. 24 In the Open dialog. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 21 On the Options Bar.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. As you place the return diffusers. and click Open. 22 In the drawing area.

under Other. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. click Yes. Level. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. as shown. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select one of the return diffusers. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 31 In the alert dialog. and click to select the lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and click OK. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. select Strong Reference.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 32 In the Project Browser. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. for Reference.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

41 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ ■ For the end point. and click OK. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. for Constraints ➤ Offset. For the start point. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . click the Level 1 line. 44 Zoom in to space 115. enter 9' 0"2750.

However. click Training Files.Press Esc. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. When you highlight a space. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. the space crossing lines display. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You then create the logical connection between the system components. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. you also use the System Browser to validate systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. After creating the logical connection. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. right-click the title. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems.rvt. and click View ➤ Systems. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. including energy analysis. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. verify that Design ➤ HVAC .

the number of elements is updated. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 15 Click Cancel. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 12 In the System Browser. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. System Name. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. As you add diffusers to systems. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 11 In the drawing area. On the Options Bar. Connect Into. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. review the Number of Elements. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. and Flow value.

18 Click OK. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. for Mark. In this exercise. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 25 Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. which updates the name in the System Browser. 22 Click OK. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). Rename the system Next. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. under Identity Data. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. under Mechanical. for System Name. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. the air terminals are the children. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 26 Click Finish Editing System. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.17 Using the method learned previously. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. In this exercise. and the system connects them.

indicating that it’s the active view. A Generate Layout tab displays. When you highlight a space using the cursor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. the Network type provides several solutions. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. for Solution Type. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the drawing area. In this case. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions.HVAC Plan. the space crossing lines display. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. Also. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Network. which provides various layout tools.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. and display solution 1. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select the upper left diffuser.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

For Maximum Flex Duct Length. enter 9' 10 1/2". 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. you’ll get an error in a later step. For Duct Type. Select Branch. For Flex Duct Type. For Offset. click Modify.7 On the Options Bar. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . enter 9' 10 1/2". 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Offset. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. as shown. Click OK. click Settings. enter 3'. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings.Round. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Duct Type.

or manually modify the duct. Either relocate the system components.11 Click Finish Layout. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. select a different layout solution. as is the elbow itself. or offset elevations are incorrect. For example.

98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. thus it is not part of the system. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and click OK. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. select By View. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. for Color Scheme. for Values Displayed. The first time you press Tab. select Duct Color Fill . Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. If the entire network does not highlight. fittings. highlight a segment of the main duct. and click to select it. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Usually. Using a flow-based color scheme. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. but not all values are used in this view. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops.Flow. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. a disconnection exists. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and equipment. and then click OK.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. under Graphics.

under Mechanical . select the color scheme legend. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and press Enter. 20 In the drawing area. and then press Esc to clear the selection. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. and on the Options Bar. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. select one of the diffusers in the system. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the WSHP. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . for Schemes. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. and click OK. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view.Velocity. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. select Duct Color Fill . note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Flow. 26 Click OK.Airflow.

The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Select the upper segment of main duct.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Select Restrict Height.08 in-wg/100ft. The ductwork and fittings are updated. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and select 16". press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). select Calculated Size Only. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Click OK. for Branch Sizing. click Cancel. and drag it to the right. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. and then click to select it. Under Constraints. highlight a segment of the duct. and enter . select Friction. Select Only.

The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. static pressure. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. and pressure loss. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Using this tool. Use the information that displays (flow. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . pressure.

34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. 35 Click Finish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. also known as the critical path.rvt. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. click Training Files.NOTE As you inspect a system. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.

5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and select the WSHP.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and click Draw Duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and click to specify the end of the main duct. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design is highlighted. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.

use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. double-click MEP . Front. and click Draw Duct. 15 On the ViewCube. select the top right diffuser.3D MEP. 11 On the Options Bar. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. NOTE When drawing duct. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . right-click the connector grip. select 9' 10 1/2". Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. for Offset. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. click the corner where the Top. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 14 In the Project Browser.

The ductwork is automatically created. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. in space 115. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. the color fill indicates the flow value. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. Also. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 19 In the drawing area. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 22 Using the same method. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). it is considered a closed loop. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

25 Press Esc. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to the open end of the main duct. You can ignore the warning.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. and select the top left diffuser.

30 Press Esc twice. and click to select it. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. and then click Modify. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop.

36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. for Flow. and then click OK. under Mechanical . 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. clear Restrict Height. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system.Airflow. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. under Constraints. such as a plenum. and click OK. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 40 Using the same method. select a segment of the main duct.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct.

including 2 base mounted pumps. Create return and supply piping systems. In this lesson. 109 . Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Automatically and manually lay out piping.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Then. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode.

110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . on level 3 of the building model.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.rvt. you place mechanical equipment. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.

7 On the Options Bar.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.High Efficiency . and select WSHP . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view.Left Return . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.2-6 Tons . as shown. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Horizontal . verify that Wall faces is selected. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. in corridor 328. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .

12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. click the dimension. and click to place the dimension. click the top edge of the WSHP. as shown. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 10 Select the WSHP.8 Click the corridor wall face. and enter 2'. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and in the Type Selector. verify that the WSHP is still selected. as shown.

select the 2 WSHPs. as shown. for Water Flow. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. enter 12 GPM. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. enter 9'. Under Mechanical. for Offset. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to place it in the mechanical room. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.14 Click Modify. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Click OK. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 17 Press Esc to clear the selection.

22 Close the file with or without saving it. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. you create the return and supply piping systems.21 Click Modify. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . including flow and pressure. Create the logical connection between the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.

5 In the System Browser. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. analyses cannot be performed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. but without a corresponding system. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.rvt. click Training Files. and click View ➤ Piping. Creating a Piping System | 115 .Mech 330). Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . right-click the Systems column heading.Design is highlighted. Unlike logical connections (systems). and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . where it is easier to review the information. You can create pipes to connect system components. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

In the System Browser. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 In the drawing area. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Assigning a system component to an existing system. As you assign equipment to systems. for System Name. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. 10 On the Options Bar. This display indicates that the system is selected. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. while pressing Ctrl. select the 2 WSHPs. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and the Edit System tool is not active. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Therefore. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. select the boiler. Notice that on the Options Bar. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

and select the cooling tower.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. under Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. You have created the hydronic return system.13 Click Finish Editing System. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. double-click Roof . 17 On the Options Bar. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. for System Name.HVAC Plan . enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.Design. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 In the Project Browser.

select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 23 Close the roof plan view. 29 Right-click CHWS. 26 Click Finish Editing System. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). and click Select. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. In heating mode. and bypasses the cooling tower. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 25 Select the boiler. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. expand the Hydronic Return system category. and click OK. and click Expand All. 28 Using the same method. indicating the logical connection. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).22 In the Select Connector dialog. In cooling mode. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements.

33 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. you can view several parameters. under Mechanical. enter 18 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. for Water Flow. and click OK. expand Piping. and click Column Settings. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. You also manually modify the layout path as required. and click Properties.In the System Browser. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. and click OK. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 32 In the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component.

you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. A system preview displays in red. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.HVAC Plan . TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. and click to select it. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).rvt. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. you can place the cursor over a system component. then the Select a System dialog displays. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . click Check None. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. When you draw a box to select components. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . select CHWR. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 10 Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). press Tab to highlight the system. and click OK.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. click Training Files. select Mechanical Equipment. 9 In the Select a System dialog.Mech 330). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.Design is highlighted. 5 In the Filter dialog. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. the boiler.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

structural beams. duct. verify that Solutions is selected. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. It does not reference the architecture. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. or architectural components. For Inset. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. click Settings. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Perimeter. enter 1' 6''. 13 Click Cancel. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 .11 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''.

View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. and press Tab 3 times. to display the path with thinner lines. 17 Optionally. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. With each Tab. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 19 In the drawing area. and the flow for the other is 12. the flow for one WSHP is 18. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment.16 Click Finish Layout.

22 Select the boiler. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. and access its instance properties. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 23 Under Mechanical. and click OK. under Mechanical. 24 Press Esc. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). and click OK. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 .

you physically close the CHWR loop. Logically. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously.HVAC Plan . which propagates flow throughout the system. the Number of Elements is now 8. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design. click Edit System. 28 In the Project Browser. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. On the Options Bar. Next. double-click Level 1 . 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 32 Click Finish Editing System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 27 On the System Tools panel. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

select a WSHP. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. and click Cancel. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. 38 Using the same method. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. as shown. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. under Mechanical. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. access its instance properties. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. 35 Using the drag control.

select CHWS. 41 Click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and then click OK. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. For Slope.40 In the Select a System dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. Click Settings. enter 1' 6''. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. enter 0''/12''. For Inset. select Perimeter 1 of 5.

as shown. as shown. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 48 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 47 In the drawing area. In a later exercise. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 46 Click Modify.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. (Both sections are at the same elevation. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).

Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 51 Click Finish Layout. To create the piping system.50 Using the same method. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. or offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. Either relocate the system components. Add piping to close the supply loop. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). select a different layout solution. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system.

Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. as shown. and the return pipes are magenta.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you work in the training file. click Training Files. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. double-click 3D HVAC Building. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i.rvt.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ 3D Views. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .

select the section of piping. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. as shown. 7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. Click to specify the reference point. 9 In the 3D view. select the boiler. and press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 12 In the 3D view.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 13 In the plan view. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and the lower one is secondary. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and click Draw Pipe. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. select the boiler. select the return pipe riser. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). The connections are automatically created. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected.

and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down. enter 1' . and you select 1 connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector.In a plan view. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. enter 2'. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right.7''. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. for Offset.

The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. and click OK. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and select it. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. As you place piping runs that are close together. select the primary base mounted pump. 19 In the plan view. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and the appropriate fittings are created. 18 Press Esc twice. as shown.

NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 27 Move the cursor to the right. and when the connector point displays. you select the tee fitting. 28 Press Esc. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 29 If necessary. click to connect to the pump. and click Draw Pipe. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click to draw the pipe. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click the minus symbol. right-click the bottom connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 31 On the Options Bar. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. 33 Press Esc.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click to create the pipe. right-click the discharge connector. select the primary base mounted pump. enter 4'. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.

35 Using the method learned previously. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. these pipe connections were created automatically.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.

select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. and press Enter. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. right-click the bottom control on the tee. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. ■ Move the cursor down. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to create the pipe. type 1'.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. enter 9' 6''.

right-click. you validate the flow through the system. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. You now have a closed loop system. and click Element Properties.37 Click Modify. Next. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.

44 In the 3D view. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. and click OK. 43 Press Esc. 46 Press Esc. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. The flow is being propagated through the piping. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Element Properties. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. Connect the cooling tower Next. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. notice that under Mechanical.50 or 50% of the Flow. select the cooling tower. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 48 In the plan view. for Cooling Water Flow. 41 Using the same method. view the properties for the secondary pump. 40 Click Cancel.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. under Mechanical. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). the value is 0 GPM. When you create the pumps in parallel. under Mechanical.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet). NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. Adding Valves In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. the water bypasses the cooling tower. When the valve is open. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and close the dialog. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.rvt. click Training Files. and is heated by the boiler.50 In the 3D View. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. select the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Valves | 143 . and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. The bypass valve is closed by default.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and select Ball Valve . indicating that it’s the active view.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. as shown. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 4 On the Options Bar. 8 Press Esc twice. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. place another Ball Valve . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method. parallel to the previously placed valve. 12 Select Ball Valve .10 Press Esc. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. under Mechanical. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. and select Ball Valve . For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). and select Ball Valve . and click OK.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. right-click. In heating mode. 20 Select the bypass valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). 19 Using the same method. Adding Valves | 145 . and click Element Properties. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.

The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM.HVAC Plan . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. click Training Files. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM.rvt.22 Using the method you just learned. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Initially. indicating that it’s the active view. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. as shown. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. click Pipe Color Fill . and click OK. and click OK.Size. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Pipe Color Fill .Flow. for Schemes. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Sizing Pipe | 147 . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.

Under Constraints. for Branch Sizing. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. and click to select the branch. select Friction. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. enter 5 FPS. Select And. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. and for Velocity. 13 Press Esc. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. and enter 2.25 FT/100ft. Click OK. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.

or manually modify the pipe. or offset elevations are incorrect. click Training Files. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Inspecting the System In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Using the System Inspector. Either relocate the system components. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. select a different layout solution. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.rvt. Inspecting the System | 149 .IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. pressure.

150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and pressure information including pressure loss.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. flow. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. An inspection flag reports the section number. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. This information helps you modify the system design. as required. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.

you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and the Pressure Loss is 1. 9 Using the same method. targeting those systems that need attention. and to size pipe. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. In this exercise. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you need to validate them. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. the Static Pressure is 7.89 psi.67 psi. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK.88 psi. for Fluid Temperature. select 90° F. as shown. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. inspect Section 6 again. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. 10 Click Finish. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1.

152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .HVAC Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Warnings display.Design ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan . 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and click Show to view all of the system components. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. the pipe is associated with that system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed.Design. 9 Right-click CHWS. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. thus assigning the components to a system. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. In the System Browser. 7 In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). If you place components without assigning them to a system.Design. For example. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. After you assign components to a system. click Training Files.rvt. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. As you learned when placing components. and double-click Level 3 . you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. and click View. and for pipe sizing. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. 6 In the Project Browser. After you have assigned all components to systems. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 4 In the System Browser. right-click the Systems titlebar. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and confirm unassigned system components. click Close.TIP If you have multiple views open. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. and click Expand All. 13 Right-click CHWR. and select Level 3 . 10 Using the same methods. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.Design floor plan.HVAC Plan . confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. expand the Unassigned folder. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. otherwise. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 14 Using the methods that you learned. right-click Hydronic Return. 12 In the System Browser.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 .

156 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Define required lighting. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Copper. click (Open). For Temperature Rating. ■ ■ For Factor. select 75. wiring. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. distribution systems. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter THHN. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.rvt.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages.04. select Wiring Types. expand Wiring . For Temperature. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select 90. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Select Correction Factor. For Material. select Copper. ■ ■ For Material. click Training Files. You also add a wiring type.Wire Sizes. enter 1. As you place components and create circuits. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. speeding up the design phase. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Click OK.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

for Custom Colors. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click Background Color. select Red. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red.■ ■ For Value. Click OK three times. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create power loads. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. 167 . power circuits. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create a panel schedule. Then. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. First. as you place lighting fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels.

select the color legend. 2 In the drawing area. select Average Estimated Illumination. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.Lighting Color Fill view is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the Color dialog. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. click (Open). Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. Click OK. for the Spaces Category. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. You can create additional color schemes. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. Under Scheme Definition.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Basic Colors. select the color for Less Than 20.rvt. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . By using orange as the color for this range. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.00 fc. select Orange.00 fc.

5 fc range is satisfied.5 fc range. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. zoom to space Library 219. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 8 In the Project Browser.7 In the Project Browser. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.Lighting Ceiling plan. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 13 Click the Level 2 . with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.277. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . The red field will clear once the +/.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . which is the lowest value in the specified range. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.

24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 20 Select the lighting fixture. the fixtures will move accordingly. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. select Multiple. 19 Press ESC to end the command. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 18 Click to place the fixture. 25 On the Options Bar. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. 27 Press ESC to end the command. select the 3 fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 28 In the drawing area. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.32 Press ESC.

Click OK. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . and for Category.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . click Check None.277V. select Lighting Fixtures. 36 In the Filter dialog.

The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.

click the ceiling grid line as shown.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 42 In the drawing area. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 41 On the Options Bar. select Multiple Alignment. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. The lighting delta is satisfied.277V.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns.

rvt. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify the light fixture IES files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . In the next exercise. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. click (Open).45 Press ESC to end the command. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . scroll to view space space Library 219.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 2 Tile the views as shown. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting Plan.Lighting Color Fill plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.

Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Click OK. ■ Under Photometrics. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. In the Select File dialog.93. Under Photometrics. select Luminous Flux. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. select 463T5_S. click the value for Initial Intensity. select T5 [HO]. for Type Mark. Under Electrical. click the value for Initial Color. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . ■ Click OK twice.85. specify 15000. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . select Xenon and click OK. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Under Photometrics.00 VA. enter .■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. enter . for Apparent Load. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. enter F15. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ Click Apply. for Lamp. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. enter 162.00 lm. Under Identity Data. for Ballast Loss Factor.277V and click OK. In the Name dialog. for Color Preset.ies and click Open. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. and click OK.

12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 10 In the Filter dialog. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. click Check None. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. and for Category. Click OK. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .277V. select Lighting Fixtures.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

Note the lighting delta updates again. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.Press Delete. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. select the top center fixture. 15 In space Library 219.

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

you add switches. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Junction Boxes. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and Receptacles | 183 . and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Junction Boxes. and receptacles to your design. junction boxes. In the next exercise. click Training Files. click (Open). zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Placing Switches. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Placing Switches. 2 In the drawing area.Press Delete.

184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.277V. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 7 Click to place the switch.

Junction Boxes. The element type Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.NoLoad. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 185 . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.rfa and click Open.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Select Junction Boxes . 9 Press ESC to end the command. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.

Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. Click Edit Type. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. In the Type Properties dialog. note that Apparent Load is set to 0.14 Press ESC to end the command. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . for Mark. enter JB-1NL. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE When entering values. Under Electrical. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter 9’0”.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. for Level 2 .Offset. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK twice. note the Number of Poles is 1. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. zoom to space Library 219. 15 Select the junction box. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 21 In the drawing area.

Expand Electrical. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 23 In the System Browser. Expand General. Click OK. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Distribution System. Select Load. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Space Name. right-click and click Column Settings. and Voltage. Select Size. Junction Boxes. and Number of Elements. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 187 . Space Number. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. NOTE If necessary. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 26 In the System Browser. 24 For any column.

34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 31 Close the System Browser. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.

Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 189 . 40 On the Options Bar. select Copy and Multiple. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Junction Boxes. 38 Select the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown.

move the cursor along the wall. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.

43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.rvt. click Training Files. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. 2 In the drawing area. Adding wiring to a project is optional. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click (Open). zoom to the space Electrical 220. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and work toward the higher voltage. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).

9 On the Options Bar.Surface: 100A. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK.Loads. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 15 On the Options Bar. select 120/208 Wye. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 Select the panelboard. 8 Select the panelboard. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution System. for Distribution System. For Panel Name. 7 Press ESC to end the command. enter 20. select 480/277 Wye. for Max. enter PP-2B. #1 Pole Breakers.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 .

enter 20. For Panel Name. click Check None. Click OK. for Max. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 23 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. #1 Pole Breakers. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Instruction 221. enter LP-2B. Click OK. 20 In the drawing area.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . which is the logical connection between the elements.Loads.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

32 Press ESC. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.28 Press ESC to end the command. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 33 Select the switch on the right. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.

35 Select the left three-way switch.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .

39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Wires. for Hot Conductors. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. enter 2.Loads. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. except without wire. and for Category. click (Open).37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click Check None. Click OK. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 41 In the Filter dialog.

and then expand circuit 1. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical.rvt. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. right-click on the Systems heading. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Click OK. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Distribution System. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 In the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Load. Voltage. click Training Files. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Rating. expand Power. 13 In the System Browser. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Expand Electrical. and Voltage Drop are selected. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. 30 Close the System Browser. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. under Electrical. 22 With the junction box still selected. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221.

46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. for Type Mark. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 47 In the drawing area. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 40 Click OK twice. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Click OK. under Identity Data. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. click below the first one to place it. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Edit Type.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. enter FR4. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Click Yes. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Click Tags. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222.

48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Click OK. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. and click Apply. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area.rfa. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. select Lighting Fixture Tags. for File Name. Click Save. select Break. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Click OK. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click OK. 56 In the Filter dialog. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. and for Category. 52 In the Save As dialog. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Deselect Break and for Suffix. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. For Circuit Number. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Check None. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. enter a comma. Next you create a switch system. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

2 In the drawing area. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Electrical Lighting. enter a. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. click (Open).Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Click OK. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. for Switch ID. click Training Files. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Select the occupancy sensor.rvt. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.

Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.Lighting.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Click OK. under Electrical . enter b. for switch ID. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

7 In space Electrical 220. click (Open). 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.rvt. Creating Power Loads | 207 . lighting. click Check None. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. 2 In the drawing area. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Circuits are used for power. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. select the PP-2B panel. Click OK. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. click Training Files. 4 In the Filter dialog. and data systems. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and for Category.26 Close the file with or without saving it. select Electrical Fixtures.

for Ground Wire Tick Mark. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. Click OK. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. under Electrical . 13 Select the wire again. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 15 In the Load Family dialog. and click Open. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark.rfa. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 2.Loads. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and in the right pane. and click Element Properties. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Hot Conductors. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. and in the drawing area. 19 Click OK. select Wiring. select Hook Wire Tick Mark.

21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 22 In space Electrical 220. and click to select the circuit. as shown. select the PP-2B panel. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark.

as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 28 In the drawing area. 29 In space Instruction 221.26 Press Delete. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. in space Instruction 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next you balance the loads for your design. click Open. 3 In the Electrical space. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 2 In the drawing area. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source.rvt. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. select panel LP-2B. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Finally. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. zoom to space Electrical 220.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 31 Close the file with or without saving it.

Click OK. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice that the loads on Phase A. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. and Phase C . 12 Select panel PP-2B. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 1-#10. 14 Close the warning dialog. 1-#12. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . enter 30A. Under Electrical-Loads.3712 VA. 1-#10. click Rebalance Loads. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog.3616 VA). Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. for Rating. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 1-#12. Phase B 3636 VA. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. Scroll down. 6 Click OK. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. B.

enter 25A. for Rating. click Training Files. and click OK. and click OK. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. for Rating. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. Select PP-2B. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . under Electrical . 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. enter 30A. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 17 Close the warning dialog. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating.Loads.15 Select panel PP-2B.rvt. under Electrical . 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. Click OK. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Next you create a panel schedule. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Loads.

click Edit. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Select the schedule.Panel Schedules. for Appearance. Under Header Text. and open E601 . The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. for Font Size. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Body Text. for Font Size. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. under Other. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. select Berlin Sans FB. select Bold and Italic. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 11 Click OK twice. 4 Close the report. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. click (Open). enter 3/32. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. enter 1/8. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Under Header Text. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Font. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. expand Sheets (all).rvt.

10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. Expand Unassigned. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. each with a load of 180VA. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. In the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. press TAB once. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. select space Lounge 212. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. In the System Browser. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. Checking Your Design | 215 .

expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. select MDP-1. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 In the drawing area. 16 Close the details dialog.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 15 In the dialog. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Warnings. zoom to space Electrical 214. for Panel.

217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . click Training Files. In this lesson. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. in addition to loading existing families.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. Adding a pipe size. type PVC . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i.Sanitary.Design is open. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. click Duplicate. planning is critical to a successful design.Vent. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 219 . you create a PVC pipe type. right-click PVC . and verify that Level 1 . 2 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 4 In the Name dialog.Plumbing Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. and click OK. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. In this exercise.

Sch 40 . enter 1/2''. 26 Click OK. enter 5/8''. select None. under Mechanical. 15 For System Type. For Offset. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.PVC .DWV. 18 For System Type. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select Tee Vent . In the Project Browser. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 10 On the Selection panel.0''.DWV: Standard. 13 In the right panel. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 21 In the right pane. for Nominal. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. and click OK. 25 For Outside. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 17 In the left pane. select Branch. click Training Files. select Sanitary. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 22 Click New Size. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. Tee. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . for Pipe Connector Tolerance. enter -4' . select Plastic. Cross. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.PVC . 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select Tee. click Pipe Settings.Vent is listed. 27 For the new pipe size.rfa.5 In the Type Properties dialog.Sch 40 . select Sanitary.Sch 40 . and click Main. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . PVC . 24 For Inside Diameter. for Material. enter 10°. enter 27/32''. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. under Pipe Types. 6 Click OK. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. click Modify. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.DWV: Standard.PVC . and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . Tap. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

sanitary piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. vent. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. 221 . Create the hot water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. add a hot water heater. and hot and cold water piping. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. including plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Create the cold water system.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Plumbing Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . NOTE To identify a space name and number. you add 2 toilets. including the men’s room (space Male 107). click Training Files. 1 urinal. and verify that Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. as shown. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.Design is open.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.

Flush Valve . Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . 1 wall-mounted urinal. 5 On the Placement panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. under Water Closet . select Public . and 3 sinks.6 gpf. against the left wall.Wall Mounted.1. 4 On the Element panel.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. in the Type Selector. as shown. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space.

above the first in the standard toilet space. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Wall Hung. zoom in closer. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line.) 8 Press Esc. (Again.7 Click to place another toilet. use the reference line to center the fixture. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. and press Esc. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. under Urinal .

Rectangular. under Floor Drain . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer . In placing the fixture. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). 14 Click Modify.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Placement panel.2'' Drain. click Place on Face.

17 If all disciplines are displayed.rvt. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. and a floor drain. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. right-click in the System Browser table heading. a urinal. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and review the components listed under this system. In this exercise. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. and click View ➤ Piping. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. click Training Files. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and Default Domestic Cold Water.

draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. 6 In the plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 . 2 In the Project Browser. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 8 In the Filter dialog. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. clear Lines (<Overhead>).Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected.Design is open.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. and click OK. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Plumbing Plan . 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. expand Sanitary. 12 On the Edit System panel. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 11 On the Options Bar. click Finish Editing System.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. so the Create Sanitary System is available. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. for System Name. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. If you deselected the drain. You include the bathroom space number in the name. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 13 In the Systems Browser. enter Sanitary 107. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 In the Select a System dialog. at the midpoint of the detail lines. select Sanitary 107. as shown. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. a toilet. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. select one of the components in the system. for example.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . A preview of the piping layout displays. and click OK. The base is placed.

26 On the Options Bar. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Slope. 23 For Offset. 24 In the left pane. and click OK. for Offset. for Solution Type. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. enter -1' 0''. 21 On Options Bar. and modify it to meet project requirements. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1/8'' / 12''. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 27 Click Modify. and for Offset. select Branch. The default settings are automatically modified. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select Main. select 4''. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. and click Settings. 25 On the Options Bar. You accept this suggested solution. for Diameter.19 On the Options Bar. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. select Intersections. enter -1' 0''. click Solutions. enter -4'-0”. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical.

Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments.

use the ViewCube to orient the view.30 In the 3D view. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 31 Click Modify. as shown. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . click Finish Layout. 34 On the Generate Layout panel. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.33 Using the previous method.

234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. select the fitting and click to reorient it. When a fitting is reversed. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.

you continue with the work from the last exercise. and check the slope control. adding sinks in the men’s room.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.

6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. and verify that Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . under Lavatory .Rectangular. as shown. in the Type Selector.Public. 5 On the Placement panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Element panel. select 22''x22'' .Design is open.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt.

in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. enter 2' 4''. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. select Multiple. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .7 Click Modify. For example. 8 Select the sink. TIP When entering dimensions. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. On the Options Bar. and press Enter to create a second sink.

and press Enter to create the third sink. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 12 In the drawing area. 16 On the Edit System panel.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. click Add To System. 11 In the System Browser. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Press Esc. click Finish Editing System. 15 Click the 3 sinks. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

double-click 3D Plumbing. 22 In the plan view. with the tee fitting selected. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 21 Select the tee. 20 Select the fitting. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. as shown.In the System Browser. and click Draw Pipe. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.Design ➤ 3D Views. use the ViewCube to orient the view. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 19 In the 3D view. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system.

NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. enter 1/8'' / 12''. enter 2' .6''. 26 On the Options Bar. and click to draw the pipe. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. for Offset. 27 Click Modify. When you press the Spacebar. and click Apply. 24 On the Options Bar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. for Slope.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. press Spacebar. In this example.

Sch 40 . click to place the fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. 29 In the Type Selector. and when the vertical center line displays. select Standard. 31 Click Modify. under Wye 45 Deg Double . move the cursor over the stub pipe. 32 Select the double wye fitting. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.PVC . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 30 In the 3D view.

you add pipe segments to the double wye. 37 Select the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. 36 In the section view. 34 Press Esc. for Offset. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . on the Options Bar. and press Enter. and press Enter. enter 6''. enter 1'. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right.33 With the fitting selected. double-click the section head to open the section view. right-click the right connector. zoom in to the double wye fitting. In the next steps. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view.

40 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. as shown. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . and click to place the pipe. 42 Click Modify.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool.

46 In the section view. right-click the bottom connector. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 49 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 48 Click Modify. 47 Move the cursor down. press Spacebar. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. and press Esc.

50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 56 Using the same method. 54 Click Modify. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 53 Using the same method. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 52 In the plan view.Sch 40 . select the P-Trap on the left. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.DWV. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . select Standard.PVC . 51 In the Type Selector. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. under Trap P . 55 In the 3D view. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.

Click Modify. Select the double wye pipe on the left. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. select the left P-Trap. 58 Using the same method. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the plan view. Move the cursor to the left. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click in the plan view. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. and press Enter. enter 6''. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. connect the right sink to the double wye..

and select a proposed solution. while pressing Ctrl. click Finish to select the recommended solution. On the Routing Solutions panel. as shown. Press Esc. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. under Pipe Types. select the section of pipe you just drew. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select PVC Sanitary. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view.■ In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. In the Type Selector.

248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. for Slope. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i.rvt. 62 On the Options Bar. and verify the slope. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. click Finish. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. adjusting the sanitary stack. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select Standard. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click Modify. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 9 In the Type Selector. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.PVC .Floor level line.DWV. as shown. right-click the top connector.Plumbing Plan . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 7 On the Selection panel.Overall. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 10 In the 3D view.Sch 40 . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. select the elbow fitting on the right. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. and click to draw the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. select the vertical stack.Design.Design. 3 In the Section view. 5 Select the tee.

PVC . under Plug .Sch 40 .11 Click Modify. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 12 Select the fitting. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 18 In the plan view. 15 Press Esc. for Offset. select Standard. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 Click the rotate control once. 14 On the Options Bar. enter 1'-0”. 17 In the Type Selector.DWV. as shown.

19 Click Modify.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .rvt.Plumbing Plan . Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.

To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 14 In the System Browser. minimize the Sanitary system. select Domestic Hot Water.) 10 Click OK.Design ➤ 3D Views. for System Type. and click OK. for System Type. select Domestic Hot Water. and click Main. select Pipe Types: Water. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D Plumbing . 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. under Design ➤ Plumbing . expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Pipe Types: Water. select Branch.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. 4 In the right pane. select Domestic Cold Water. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. 9 In the left pane. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. and for System Type. select Main. verify that the value is 9' 0''. 7 In the left pane. 17 In the Filter dialog.Overall. 6 In the left pane.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. select Branch. draw a selection box to select the toilets. urinal. For Offset. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. if necessary. 15 In the plan view. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Unassigned. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. select Plumbing Fixtures. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. For Offset. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Check None. enter 9' 3''. and sinks.

click Edit System. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. For Flow Conversion Method. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. click Finish Editing System. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. In the System Browser. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. enter DCW 107.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel. 21 On the Edit System panel.

37 On the Options Bar. right-click the top DCW connector. and click the connector. connect the second toilet. 31 On the Options Bar. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. and press Enter. enter 3' . 34 In the plan view. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 32 Move the cursor to the right. click to the left of the urinal. 28 In the Type Selector. For Slope. and click Draw Pipe.2 7/8''. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. as shown. For Offset. under Pipe Types. enter 7''. and press Enter. enter 10'. select the sink above the urinal.25 Using the same method. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 30 In the plan view. for Offset. 33 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. 35 In the Type Selector. as shown. select 3/4''. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. enter 0”/12”. enter 4'0”. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. select Water. for Offset. 36 Move the cursor to the left.

(Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. 41 Select the top sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click OK.39 Move the cursor to the left. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 40 Click Modify. and click to connect to the main cold water line.

add a water heater. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. you create the hot water system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise.44 Using the same method.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Browser. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. 6 In the plan view. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.Plumbing Plan . Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . select the 3 sinks. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.Overall. expand the Unassigned folder.rvt. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the System Browser. while pressing Ctrl. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

as shown. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. 13 In the plan view. 14 Click Modify.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. and click OK. for System Name. select 0. and click Edit System. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. you edit the system to add equipment. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. in the Unassigned folder. under Water Heater . verify that DCW 107 is selected. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first.6 Gallon. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom.Tankless. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 15 In the System Browser. In later steps. When designing systems. Default Domestic Cold Water. Default Domestic Hot Water. 10 In the System Browser. 12 In the Type Selector. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed.

and select Draw Pipe. 27 Click Modify. click Finish Editing System. 24 Move the cursor up. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 26 Move the cursor to the right. and click the water main line. as shown. select the water heater. and press Enter. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. enter 10’. 19 Select the water heater. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. and on the Edit System panel. 22 In the Type Selector. for Offset. right-click the middle left connector. 25 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. Offset: 4' 6''. enter 1' 6''. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Slope: 0''/12''.

enter 1''. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 37 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. for Diameter. enter 1' 6''. 33 On the Edit System panel. and for Offset. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. select 4'-6''. enter 9' 0''. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). click Edit System. for Offset. 36 Move the cursor down. and press Enter. select a sink. as shown. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 38 Move the cursor to the right. and in the System Selector. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. click Finish Editing System. 35 On the Options Bar. 30 On the System Tools panel. and on the Placement Tools panel. and click Draw Pipe.

40 On the Options Bar. for Offset. enter 1’.39 Move the cursor down. 42 Click Modify. as shown. enter 2' 8''. and click just above the bottom sink. 41 Move the cursor down. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . and press Enter.

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

com/revitmep-documentation and download them. If the tutorial training files are not present. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and click Duplicate. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 267 . you can choose to save your work. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. You create a new pipe type. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this tutorial. After finishing each exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.autodesk. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. In this lesson. 2 Right-click Standard. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. However. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.rvt. go to http://www. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i.

9 Click OK. you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Main. verify that 9' 0" is selected. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. verify that 9' 0" is specified. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and then click OK. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. For Pipe Type. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. In the left pane. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. In the next exercise. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. structural beams. select Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. 6 In the Project Browser. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For System Type. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. or architectural components. For Offset. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. For System Type. you create project parameters and work with schedules. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. under Mechanical. In this exercise. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. and click Properties. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. Next. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. click Rename. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). However. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. and enter Fire Protection Wet. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. duct. for Material. select Carbon Steel. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. For Pipe Type. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. select Fire Protection Wet.

6 In the drawing area.rvt. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Under Categories. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 8 Using a crossing window. the space crossing lines display. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i.Fire Protection Plan . and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Fire Protection. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. and click Element Properties. select space Instruction 221 as shown. select the upper half of the building. For Group parameter under. enter Sprinkler Zone. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. click Add. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. for Name. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Spaces. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 5 Click OK twice. enter Zone 1. select Fire Protection. When you highlight a space using the cursor. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that only Spaces are selected. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. for Sprinkler Zone. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. you create schedules for sprinkler design. including a calculated value parameter. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. 13 Using the same method. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.rvt. and then access instance properties. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 10 In the Filter dialog. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Fire Protection. select Zone 1. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. click Training Files. and then click OK. to which you add various parameters. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. enter Zone 2. and then click OK.

select Fire Protection. For Name. select Length. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. The schedule displays. 14 Select the new header. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . For Rounding. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. double-click on each column separator. Click OK. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. select To the nearest 1'. 11 Click OK twice. enter Maximum Spacing. enter Light. For Units. indicating that it’s the active view. Obstructed-Combustible. In the Maximum Spacing column. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Key name. 6 Using the same method. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. and click Field Format. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 10 In the Format dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. 9 On the Formatting tab. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. select Spaces. and on the ribbon. Click OK. select Maximum Spacing. For Type of Parameter. 7 Click OK. For Group parameter under. click Add Parameter. for Name. click the Formatting tab. Select Schedule keys. select Feet and fractional inches. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. enter 15. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Fire Protection Plan .

Click OK. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. For Name. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. select Spaces.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. under Available fields. enter 130. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. and press Enter. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Unobstructed Ordinary.

The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Type. select 0 decimal place. select Level. 22 Click OK twice. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . Click OK. Enter the formula operator / after Area. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. under Other. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Field Format. and click OK. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. click . For Then by. select Common. click Edit. For Discipline. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Area. for Sorting/Grouping. for Sort by. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 20 On the Formatting tab. For Rounding. For Formula. 19 Click the Formatting tab. and click View Properties. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. In the Fields dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. Select Header and Blank line. For Units. select Sprinkler Zone. select Number. select Fixed. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area.

and select Totals only. 30 Click OK twice. select Hidden field. ■ In the Format dialog. click Edit. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Sprinkler Zone. select Grand totals. For Fields. For Fields. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Then by (second instance). right-click the schedule. and click View Properties. Under Field formatting. for Filter. verify that Use default settings is selected. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Level. select Level equals Level 2. for Filter by. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 27 In the drawing area. select Number. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. At the bottom of the dialog. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. and then click Field Format. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and then select Hidden field.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line.

Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. select Embedded Schedule. and Count. and click View Properties. select Grand totals. double-click Type. Under Field formatting. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. select Sprinklers. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Count. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. delete the word Maximum. under Other. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. for Embedded Schedule. On the Formatting tab. click Edit. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. System Name. select Calculate totals. For Category. and select Totals only. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . for Fields. for Available fields.

Unobstructed. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. and access the instance properties. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. select space 221 Instruction. but their values are not determined. for Protection Area Construction Type. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 In the plan view. for Protection Area Construction Type. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. select Light. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Unobstructed. 44 In the schedule. select space 221 Instruction.Fire Protection Plan Design.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 46 With the space still selected. Unobstructed. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 50 Access the instance properties. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. and the spacing parameter values are evident. and click OK. select Ordinary. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 48 In the floor plan. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 43 Click Cancel. select Ordinary. 52 Click OK. under Identity Data. double-click FP . IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. As a result.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

If the tutorial training files are not present. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. methodology. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.rvt. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. As you create the system. you can choose to save your work. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. go to http://www. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. click Training Files. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. After finishing each exercise. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. you will understand the process. By following the recommended workflow.autodesk. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. As you place the sprinklers. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. However. and double-click Level 2 . At the end of this tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. 279 .

the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. After placing the initial sprinkler. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. When this happens. 3 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail.

9 In space Instruction 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 11 In the drawing area.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Sprinkler .Pendent . because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. select the sprinklers that you placed. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. and click to place 3 sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. while pressing Ctrl. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. as shown. 10 Press Esc twice. Adding Sprinklers | 281 .

you place non-hosted sprinklers. Next. Also. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 13 On the Options Bar. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. as shown. and then press Esc. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. verify that Constrain is cleared. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

under Constraints. For Number. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.Design. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Fire Protection Plan . Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 25 Click OK. Next. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and click Element Properties. This number is determined in the schedule. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and press Enter.FP_Ceiling view. you adjust the offset. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 18 Type WT. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 19 In the floor plan. move the cursor to the right. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. and 200C). and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 .Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. Notice that the schedule updates. for Offset. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 14' 6". specify a vertical offset. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 200B. 17 In the Project Browser. enter 11. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 29 Press Esc. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. enter 10' 6". it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. open Design ➤ FP .

30 Close the file with or without saving it. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.Design is highlighted. In the next exercise. In this exercise. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. click Training Files. Creating a Piping System In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. Unlike logical connections (systems). piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. After creating the logical connection. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. However. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection).rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.Fire Protection Plan . and with piping (physical connection).

This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. named Fire Protection Wet. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. and select Piping. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. as shown. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. click View ➤ Systems.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Creating a Piping System | 285 . 5 Right-click the header. within the Piping Systems folder. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. In the System Browser. As you assign sprinklers to systems.

select an initial piping layout. 13 In the System Browser. for System Name. 12 On the Options Bar. 11 With the system still selected. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. 14 Click Finish Editing System. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 19 Click OK. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. For Offset. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. In the left pane. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 15 In the drawing area. The Edit Piping System panel displays. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. click Settings. enter FP Wet_Zone2. providing system editing tools. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. system equipment.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Pipe Type. and click Select. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2.Wet is selected. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. select Branch. and on the Options Bar. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. and select the system. indicating the logical connection. The Generate Layout tools are activated. Next. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. verify that 9' 0" is specified. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. and number of elements in the system. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. verify that Main is selected. and a piping layout preview displays. press Tab. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. place the cursor over a sprinkler. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1.

and green represents branch lines). (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . 23 For Offset.20 On the Generate Layout panel. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. and select solution 5. for Diameter. In general. verify that Network is selected. When the layout is finished. enter -12' 0". select 2". these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. click Solutions. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. click Place Base. 22 On the Options Bar. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. as shown.

A (parallel movement control) displays. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. click Modify. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. 29 Click Finish Layout. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. as shown. On the Generate Layout panel. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

the Connect Into tool.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. and then you create piping to physically connect them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. or that offset elevations are incorrect. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 32 If necessary. or manually modify the pipe. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . Either relocate the system components. and various manual pipe creation tools. Next. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. select a different layout solution.

Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in. and select the elbow fitting as shown. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.rvt.Fire Protection Plan . 3 If necessary.

you can select the pipe or duct. for Solution Type. mechanical equipment. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. and select solution 5. 9 On the Edit System panel. and pipe or duct is created. 14 Close the System Browser. or a system component to display system tools. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. radiators. click Finish Editing System. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 12 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 5 In the drawing area. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). and so on) are logically connected by a system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Add To System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 8 In the corridor. verify that Network is selected. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). verify that Solutions is selected. 13 Click Finish Layout. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 18 Click Finish Editing System.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. air terminals.

and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and click Draw Pipe. 21 In the Piping Plan. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 24 In the Piping Plan. 28 In the drawing area. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 29 Using the same method. and then press Esc. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .20 Open Design ➤ FP . Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 27 On the Options Bar. and then tile the views.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 25 Select the sprinkler. right-click. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. for Offset. select 9'.

Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. Because the whole system highlights. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 31 In the plan view.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. select 1/4" = 1'-0". 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Protection Plan .rvt. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.Design is highlighted. for Scale. ■ 6 Press Esc.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 4 On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. for Diameter. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .21 On the Options Bar. select 4".

change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. and maximize the floor plan. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 23 Close the 3D view. and then tag the piping as shown. for Diameter. select 1 1/4".22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 26 Using the same method. 24 In the drawing area. 25 On the Options Bar. The pipe diameter is modified. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). as shown.

you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. You added tags to pipes. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. you created a wet fire protection system. In this tutorial. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In this exercise. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. For additional practice.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.

add annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 . create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.

306 .

you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. dependent views. and click OK. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. under Floor Plans. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. and click Properties.rvt. right-click Level 1. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and view references. 2 In the Project Browser. and apply a view template. click Training Files. right-click Copy of Level 1. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and click Rename. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. If the view included detail graphics. matchlines. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 307 . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 4 Using the same method. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. as shown. and click OK. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and click Apply Default View Template.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 10 In the drawing area. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 6 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. click Training Files. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. and then press Esc. views and put them on the sheet. and click OK. 9 Click OK. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. more focused. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. create dependent views for areas B and C.

20 Select the upper view reference and. 21 Using the same method. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and then press Esc. For Line Weight. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Click OK. select Double Dash 5/8". In the Color dialog. and click OK. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 19 In the drawing area. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select black. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. on the Options Bar. 13 Press Esc twice. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . click the current value./ ---). For Line Pattern. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. for Target view. select 11. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as .

310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 27 Using the same method. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. as shown. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and zoom to each of the view references.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 25 Using the same method.

The section crop lines no longer display. 2 Zoom in. for View Name. select Plumbing Isometric. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Project Browser. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and click Apply Default View Template. and select the section box. click Training Files. For Sub-Discipline. right-click 3D Plumbing. Click OK.29 Close the file with or without saving it. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing.rvt.Domestic Water.Domestic Water. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. select Documentation. For Default View Template. enter Plumbing Isometric . 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. select Plumbing. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. and click Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. for View Classification. right-click Plumbing Isometric . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to select it. Under Graphics. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently.

For Pattern. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". The selected piping displays as a dashed line.9 Right-click. select 3. press Tab 3 times. 12 Using the same method. and then click OK. and click to select it. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Click Apply. select Dash. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater.

and click to select it. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown). Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. 14 Right-click. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.

Domestic Water view with detailing. click Reveal Hidden Elements. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. In the drawing area. On the View Control Bar.15 Press Esc. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.Sanitary Waste. On the View Control Bar. and click to select it. press Tab 3 times. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. Right-click. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. 18 Using methods learned previously.

you use a plan view to create a callout view. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. For Slope. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. select To the nearest 1/8". 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. When the view is associated with a sheet. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. as shown. click on the Format value. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. In the Format dialog. verify that Common is selected. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. Creating Callout Views | 315 . and then place the callout view on a sheet. 21 Click OK twice. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 25 Press Esc twice. for Rounding.

7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 5 On the Options Bar. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary.rvt. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. select 1/4"=1'-0''. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale.

HVAC Duct Plan & Sections.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Creating Callout Views | 317 . select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click M601 . 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Click OK. select 5. drag it to the sheet. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. for Line Weight. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. 13 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. using the same method.

Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Click OK. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. right-click the callout view. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. For Default View Template.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. and select the viewport. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Apply Default View Template. enter WSHP PART PLAN. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for View Name. For Title on Sheet. 17 In the Project Browser.

Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. Creating Callout Views | 319 . The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.

25 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. under Names. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Close the file with or without saving it. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Rename. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Apply View Template.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK. right-click the detail view. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.

■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. symbols. ■ work with model-based components.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. duct tags. linetypes. 321 . and annotation to create a legend.

Creating Annotations In this exercise. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. as shown. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 8 With the text still selected. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. verify that Leader is cleared. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. select a supply diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. and then click Right Straight. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. Creating Annotations | 323 . 15 On the Options Bar. and a segment of rectangular duct. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. a return diffuser. as shown.9 Press Esc twice. a segment of round duct. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.

If necessary. 24 On the Options Bar.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 20 In the Tags dialog. and click OK.rfa. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. and click Open. for Ducts. 22 In the Tags dialog. under Category. click Load. clear Leader. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 17 Click Modify. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 21 In the Load Family dialog.

select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.25 In the drawing area. 31 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. 32 In the drawing area. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. and Attached End. as shown. 26 On the Options Bar. Leader. select Horizontal. Creating Annotations | 325 . select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical.

34 In the drawing area. for Leader. select Free End. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. as shown.33 On the Options Bar. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 40 Using the method learned previously.36 Press Esc twice. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. lay out. and click OK. and lock lighting fixtures. select Dot Open 1/16". for Leader Arrowhead. not simply an instance property. and all elements of that type are affected. Creating Dimensions | 327 . 37 In the drawing area. you use temporary dimensions to locate. That’s because you changed a type property. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. select the last tag placed.

click Training Files. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. select the dimension line. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 12 Press Esc. On the Options Bar. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. and then select the interior face of the wall. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser.

annotation symbols.3 1/2"). 19 Using the same methods. and offset them 8' from the wall. enter 8'. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 16 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 329 . Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. linework. click the 3 interior locks on the line. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints.13 Using the same method. and notes. and press Enter. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Because the dimensions are locked. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Select the dimension value (7' .

6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For View. enter Diffuser Legend. Click OK. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.rvt. ■ 9 In the drawing area. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 10 Using the same method. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . select Floor Plan. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. click Training Files. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 1/4" = 1' -0". click below the title to place the diffuser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i.8 Neck. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 5 Click in the drawing area. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . For Scale. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 331 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 14 In the drawing area.11 Press Esc. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list.

22 Zoom in to the copied component. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 24 Select the component’s break line. 21 Press Esc. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 27 While pressing Ctrl.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . The selected detail lines are now thin.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 26 Press Esc. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then press Esc. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.DROP and its text note.

MECHANICAL LEGEND. Creating a Legend | 333 . 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then click Modify. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 34 Using the method learned previously. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 33 Click to the left of the left break line. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. enter E. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 35 Change the text on the right to N. and then click Modify.30 Select Spot Elevation .Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 40 Press Esc. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.39 With the viewport still selected.

A drafting view using detail components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.113 East elevation view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Detailing 15 In this lesson. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . 335 . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. A detail callout that references another view.rvt. click Training Files. detail groups. and text. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.

5 In the drawing area. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. select each of the 2 panelboards. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.113 East on the sheet. and then modify and align the views. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Next. clear Leader. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 4 On the Options Bar.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. and click to place it. 8 Using the same method. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . place Power Riser .

select the 113 North view. and click OK. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Title on Sheet. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left.9 Press Esc. right-click. and click Activate View. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. under Identity Data. giving the appearance of a single view. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click Deactivate View. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 13 Right-click. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.

21 Using the drag control. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. select the 113 East elevation view. and click Activate View. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. as shown. 22 Press Esc. 19 Select the Level 1 line. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. In the next exercise.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. you add wiring to the diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. right-click. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

verify that Chain is selected. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Close the Project Browser. As you draw. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly.rvt. select 6. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. and click OK. and then click OK. Under Modify Subcategories. click New. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . for Name. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. In the Line Styles dialog. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. enter Electrical Power. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. 9 Beginning at the transformer. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. notice that there are no snaps active. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. expand Lines. for Line Weight. In the New Subcategory dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. click Training Files.113 North view.

for Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). as shown. enter 1/8". 13 On the Options Bar.10 Press Esc. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 11 Using the same method. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.

you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. so that the result is as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

29 Click Modify. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 28 Click above the cap. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). as shown.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.

31 While pressing Ctrl. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. select Multiple. 33 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. and then press Esc. 39 Move the cursor to the right. You enter exact values for each line length.5. enter 3/32". 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. and press Enter. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 0 0. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset.36 Press Esc. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 40 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .

47 In the drawing area. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. and then press Esc. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . change the length of the bottom line to 0 0.25. for Name. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and click OK. click on the length dimension value. 46 In the Project Browser. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 50 With the group selected. Press Esc. you can ensure that they stay together. while pressing Ctrl. select all 3 lines.125. and press Enter. enter Ground.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. expand Groups ➤ Detail. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. enter 0 0. Using the same method. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view.

Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 52 Select the detail group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. TP-2B.51 Using the method learned previously. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 54 Select the group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point.

You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 59 Close the file with or without saving it.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 5 Zoom in to view the section. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. and will place it on sheet E01. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. and click Rename. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 2 Right-click the copy. for Name. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Right-click the ViewCube.rvt. and click OK. In later exercises.

and Left sides converge. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 7 On the ViewCube. Back. and then press Esc. click Home. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .6 Select the section box. and then click the corner where the Top.

13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Under Names. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. select 3D Views. Walkthroughs. and click Apply View Template. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select 3D HVAC Iso. right-click. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. Click OK. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created.

Move the cursor down and to the left. as shown. (Right). 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper).14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. 19 Complete the text labels. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Typical. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 15 Using the same method. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. and click to specify the second leader point.

352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 23 Click on the crop region. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. under Extents. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 25 Click OK. as shown. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and under Extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop Region Visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. and then click OK.To rotate and reposition a text label. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area.

The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. and click Properties. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . 3 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Click OK.29 In the drawing area. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select 3" = 1'-0". select the isometric view. right-click the view name.rvt. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. For Scale. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a detail component. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise.

9 Zoom in to the component. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 12 On the Element panel. as shown. click the point at the top of the drain. 13 In the drawing area. Click OK. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as the rectangle start point. For View Classification. select Plumbing. select Documentation. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle).4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". for Sub-Discipline.

25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. for Type. 18 With the filled region still selected. (Line). and click OK. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 20 Select 1. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. select C. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.P. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 23 In the drawing area.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.I. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . and then press Esc. 21 In the drawing area. select the filled region. 22 Click Modify. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. Concrete.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select Multiple.28 Click Modify. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then click to select them. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 34 Press Esc. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click point 6 as the endpoint.

and then select the side of the slab above the line. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. and then press Esc. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown. 45 Using the method learned previously. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 40 Click Finish Region. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. (Rectangle).

52 In the Create Group dialog.. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.D. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 49 Click Modify. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. for Name. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. press Tab to highlight the chain. as shown. and click OK. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw wide detail lines as shown. select the Flashing Membrane group. and then click to select them.

as shown. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.55 Press Esc. 61 Using the same method. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.

Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 71 Click Modify. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 64 Press Esc twice.62 Press Esc twice. 72 If necessary. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 67 On the Options Bar. as shown. select Leader and Free End. and then click OK. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing.

79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 80 Press Esc twice. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 81 Select the text note. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 76 To select the leader start point. Drafting Detail Components | 361 .Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the text insertion point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and click to specify the second leader point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 78 Move the cursor to the left.

click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown.

and click to place it. select the view title.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 90 Press Esc.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. open P103 . 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and then press Esc twice. 88 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.

Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. select Visible. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Line Weight. you import a CAD detail drawing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. select Auto-Detect. Click Open.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. select 3. For Colors.rvt. For Layers. select Black and White. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For A-----NPP. For Import units. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view.dwg. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD.

open P103 . 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 12 In the drawing area. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the viewport title.8 Type ZF. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 11 Press Esc. and then press Esc.

366 .